LG -M710ds User Manual

page of 368

/ 368
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Quick Links

Download this manual

USER GUIDE

LG-M710ds

www.lg.com

MFL70221001 (1.0)

Table of Contents

Chapters

Summary of Contents for LG LG-M710ds

Page 2 ‫. ﻭﻧﺭﺟﻭ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬LG ‫ﺷﻛﺭ ً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺁﻣﻧﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ. ﻭﻟﻘﺩ ﺻ ُﻣﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋ ﻣ ً ﺎ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ •...
Page 3 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ: ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ .‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ: ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠ ﻔ ً ﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ: ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬...
Page 4 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬ QuickButton ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ SIM ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ...
Page 5: Table Of Contents
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ LG ‫801 ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ LG Bridge 108 FM ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫901 ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ LG Health ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬...
Page 6 ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻘﻁ، ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ. ﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﺟﺕ‬LG ‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺗﺻﻠﻳﺢ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﺗﺻﻠﻳﺣﻪ‬...
Page 7 ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ. ﺍﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻲ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ • .‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫، ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺓ ً ﺃﻭ‬LG ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘ ﺎ ً ﻟـ‬ • .‫ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺓ ً ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬...
Page 8 ‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻭ ﻟ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬ .‫ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ. ﻟﺫﺍ، ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ...
Page 9 ‫ﺗﺟ ﻧ ّ ﺏ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﻊ، ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺿﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ. ﻭﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑ ﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺫﻧﻙ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ...
Page 10 ،‫ﻟﺳﺕ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ. ﻭﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ • .‫ﻟﻳﺱ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ ﻣﺻ ﻣ ّﻣﺔ ﻹﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬LG ‫ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﻓﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ‬ • .‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬...
Page 11 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ‬ • ‫ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﺔ‬LG ‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣ ً ﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﻓﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬ • .‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬...
Page 12 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬...
Page 13 ‫، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣ ﺻ ّﻥ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬IP68 ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬ ‫. ﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺭﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ‬LG ‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬ LDI ‫ )ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ(. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐ ﻳ ّﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ‬LDI ‫ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺳﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺗﻐ ﻳ ّﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ‬...
Page 14 .‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻘﻬﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ 5.1 ﻣﺗﺭ‬ .‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ 03 ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﻙ ﻣﺑﻠ ﻼ ً ، ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ‬ • .‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ...
Page 15 QuickButton ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ .‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ Outdoor Essentials ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬ .QuickButton ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‬ .QuickButton ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ، ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ﺫ ٍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء‬ •...
Page 16 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ :‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ •...
Page 17 ‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ .‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬ • ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺷﻁ ً ﺎ، ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ •...
Page 18 ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﻓ ﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ. ﻭﻟﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ...
Page 19 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺓ ً ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ .‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ ﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ...
Page 20 QuickMemo+ QuickMemo+ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺗﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ، ﻛﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ، ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .QuickMemo+ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫: ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬ •...
Page 21 ‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ، ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ. ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ • .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء‬ .‫ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ •...
Page 22 ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺎ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ، ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ﻘ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭ ً ﺍ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ...
Page 23 ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬...
Page 24 ً ‫ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺑ ﺑ ً ﺎ ﺧﻠ ﻼ‬ .LG ‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔ ﻳ ً ﺎ. ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺃ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ، ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬...
Page 25 ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬LED ‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬ QuickButton (-/+) ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬ microSD ‫/ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬SIM ‫ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ/ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ...
Page 26 ‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ/ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ • ‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ: ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ، ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺭﻳ ﺑ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﻱ. ﺛﻡ‬ .‫ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ...
Page 27 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ، ﻓﻼﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ. ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻭﻗ ﺗ ً ﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ، ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ...
Page 28 ‫. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬SIM ‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ • .‫ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬LG ‫، ﻓ ﺧ ُ ﺫ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬...
Page 29 .‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻫﺑﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬SIM ‫ﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻋ ِ ﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬ .‫ ﻓﻘﻁ‬Nano SIM ‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ • ‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺧﺎﻝ ٍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ، ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ‬ •...
Page 30 SIM ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ‬LG ‫. ﻓﺈﻥ‬SIM ‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ • .SIM ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬SIM ‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬...
Page 31 ‫ﻻ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ. ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬ • LG .‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ، ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬...
Page 32 .‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬USB ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ‬ • ‫. ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬LG ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ • .‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬...
Page 33 .‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﻣﺎ‬Wi-Fi ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ • ® .‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‬ • .‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ • .‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ • ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ‬ •...
Page 34 ‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺣﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ً ﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ، ﻛﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ، ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻭﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ...
Page 35 ‫ﺿﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‬ .‫ﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ. ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‬ .‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﱢ ﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬ • ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ •...
Page 36 ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ...
Page 37 .‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ: ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ • .‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ: ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻌ ﻳ ّﻧﺔ‬ • Google ‫: ﺗﻣ ﻛ ّ ﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ‬Google ‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ‬ • .‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩ: ﻹﻧﺷﺎء...
Page 38 ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺕ“ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬GPS ‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔ ﻌ ّﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ SIM ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺗﺑ ﻌ ً ﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﻓ ﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﻗﺩ...
Page 39 ‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻭﻓ ﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬ .
Page 40 ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ّ ‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ، ﺿ ﻡ‬ • ‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ...
Page 41 ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺁﺧﺭ‬ .‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‬ • ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺟﻠ ﺩ ً ﺍ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ...
Page 42 ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﻣ ﻼ ً ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ، ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ...
Page 43 ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ‬ ،‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻛﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬PIN ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ‬Knock Code ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬ •...
Page 44 ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬ ‫. ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬LG ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ‬ • .‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ. ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻅﻔﺭﻙ‬...
Page 45 .‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺷ ُ ﻔﺭ َ ﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ • ‫. ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬LG ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ • .‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺁﺧﺭ‬...
Page 46 ‫ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ً ﺍ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )-( ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬Screenshots ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬ •...
Page 47 ‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬ ‫ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ. ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬Smart keyboard ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﻧﺹ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ، ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ .QWERTY ‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ • ‫ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﺭﺭ‬Smart keyboard ‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ...
Page 48 .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ .QWERTY ‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬LG ‫ﺑﺩ ﻻ ً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬...
Page 49 .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ .‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬LG ‫ﺑﺩ ﻻ ً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﻭﻉ‬...
Page 50 ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ LG ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺩ ﻻ ً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬...
Page 51 .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ .‫ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬LG .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺻﻕ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ، ﺛﻡ ﺗﻠﺻﻘﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ. ﺃﻭ، ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬...
Page 52 Clip Tray ‫ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺻﻘﻪ‬Clip Tray ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺹ، ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﺑـ‬ .‫ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .CLIP TRAY ‫ﺑﺩ ﻻ ً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ، ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬ .‫...
Page 53 .‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻬﺎ‬ .‫ ﺁﺧﺭ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬LG ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫، ﺛﻡ‬...
Page 54 ‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺗﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ، ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ: ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ. ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ •...
Page 55 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬...
Page 56 ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﺩﻯ‬Play ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬SmartWorld ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ • .‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺗﺎﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‬ •...
Page 57 ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ﻘ ً ﺎ، ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬ .‫ﻣﻧﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‬ .‫ﻻ...
Page 58 ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ، ﻛﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﻳﺩﻭ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬ .‫ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ...
Page 59 ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ، ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ، ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ • .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ...
Page 60 ‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ، ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻭﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ...
Page 61 ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ. ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠ ﻣ ً ﺎ ﻭﺃﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ...
Page 62 ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺛﻣﻳﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ، ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬ • ‫ﻭﻛﻥ ﺣﺭﻳ ﺻ ً ﺎ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻁﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬ •...
Page 63 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬ .‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )-( ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ • .‫)+( ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ، ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ‬ •...
Page 64 .‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻁ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬ .GPS ‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ﺩ ً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬ .‫...
Page 65 ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬ .‫ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬ .‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺣﺭﱢ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ •...
Page 66 ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ. ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬ AE/AF lock .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻳﺋﺗﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ...
Page 67 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ،‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬ • .‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ +/- ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ/ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ •...
Page 68 ً ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ، ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻭﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬ .‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ، ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ •...
Page 69 ‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‬ ً ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ، ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺓ‬ .‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ‬ .‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ • .‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ •...
Page 70: ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠ ﻔ ً ﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ • .‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء...
Page 71 ‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ • ‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ‬ • ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ .‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ...
Page 72 .‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ • ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬LG .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﺋﺔ‬ .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬...
Page 73: ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ
.‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ﺩ ً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‬ • .‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‬ • ‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ‬ • ‫ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ...
Page 74 ‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ‬ ،‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ‬ .‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺳﺎ ﺑ ً ﺎ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺭﻳ ﺩ ً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ...
Page 75 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧ ً ﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ، ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ، ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ‬ •...
Page 76: ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ: ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ، ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬ •...
Page 77: ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩء‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻣﺅﻗ ﺗ ً ﺎ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ. ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ • .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬ .‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬ •...
Page 78: ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ﺗ ً ﺎ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ • .‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ • .‫ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ...
Page 79: Lg Health
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺻﺣﺗﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﻣﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ .‫ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ LG Health ‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬LG Health ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .LG Health LG .‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ...
Page 80 ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﻋﻼﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺻﻪ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺑ ﻌ ً ﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﺩ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬LG Health ‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬ • ‫ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬LG Health ‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬LG Health .‫ﺗﺑ...
Page 81 ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ .‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء‬ :‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء، ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‬ •...
Page 82: Lg Backup
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ. ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬LG Backup ‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬...
Page 83: Remotecall Service
‫ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬Google ‫ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺎء‬Google ‫، ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬Google ‫ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‬Google .‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬Drive ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬Play ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬LG Backup ‫.* ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬lbf ‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬...
Page 84: Google ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ
Google ‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫. ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ﺫ ٍ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬Google ‫ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬Google ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ‬Google ‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬Google ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫، ﻓﺄﻧﺷﺊ ﺣﺳﺎ ﺑ ً ﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻭﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬Google ‫ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ،...
Page 85 Play ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬ ‫. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Play ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ِ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬ .‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﺁﺧﺭ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ...
Page 86 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬...
Page 87 ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓ ﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ • ‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ. ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫...
Page 88 Wi-Fi .Wi-Fi ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ .Wi-Fi ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ • .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ .Wi-Fi ‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ • ‫ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻭﻳﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ •...
Page 89 Wi-Fi Direct ‫ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ. ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ .Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ .Wi-Fi Direct .‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ‬ •...
Page 90 Bluetooth ‫ ﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ. ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ‬ ‫ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ؛ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬ .‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‬ .Bluetooth ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ .‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ...
Page 91 ‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ...
Page 92 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ. ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‬ .NFC ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ .‫ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬NFC ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ‬ •...
Page 93 ‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬ • .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫: ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬LG X venture • .‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ: ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ‬ • .‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ: ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬...
Page 94 .USB ‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬ .LG AirDrive ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ‬LG Bridge ‫ ﻓﺭﺩ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬LG AirDrive . www.lg.com ‫ ﻣﻥ‬LG Bridge ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬...
Page 95 .‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ. ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬USB ‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ، ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ • .‫ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬www.lg.com .USB ‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ •...
Page 96 ‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ ‫ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ‬Wi-Fi (SSID) ‫، ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻌﺭﻑ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬...
Page 97 Bluetooth ‫ﺭﺑﻁ‬ ‫ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ .‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ ‫ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺭﺑﻁ‬ .‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‬ .‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻹﻗﺭﺍﻧﻬﻣﺎ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ، ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑ ﻌ ً ﺎ‬ •...
Page 98 ‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ: ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬ • ‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ: ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ • .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ. ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ، ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ .‫ﻣﺷﻐﻠﻭ...
Page 99 ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ :‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ: ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬ • .‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ: ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬ •...
Page 100 ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ :‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ: ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ. ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬ • .‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ: ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ. ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬ •...
Page 101 • ‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ: ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟ ﻳ ً ﺎ. ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬ • .‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ‬ .LG ‫: ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬LG ‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬ • ‫: ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻼء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬Google ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ‬ •...
Page 102 ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬ ‫. ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬Google ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ: ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻳ ً ﺎ‬ •...
Page 103 ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ: ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ • .‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ/ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ: ﺭ ﺩ ّ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ • .‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ: ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‬ •...
Page 104 QuickButton ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ .QuickButton ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ QuickButton • ‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﻭ...
Page 105 ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬USIM ‫: ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ • .(PIN ‫)ﺭﻣﺯ‬ .‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ: ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ • ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ: ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬ • .‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬...
Page 106 ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ،‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ: ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ • .‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ً ﺍ ﻣﺣﺩ ﺩ ً ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ...
Page 107 ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻳ ً ﺎ؛ ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬ :‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬ ‫: ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬LG Backup • ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ. ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬ .‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬...
Page 108 ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬...
Page 109 LG Bridge ‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ ﻫﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬LG Bridge .‫ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ‬LG ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬...
Page 110 .‫ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﻭﻟﻐﺗﻙ‬http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp ‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ‬ LG ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ. ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ‬ .‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬...
Page 111 ،‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ، ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ/ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ، ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ - ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬DRM ‫ﻭﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬ ‫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻳ ً ﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬LG ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ. ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ‬ .‫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬LG ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ. ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬...
Page 112 ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺳﺭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ. ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ‬ .‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬SIM ‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫...
Page 113 ‫ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬ .‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻭﻟﺗﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬ LG ‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ‬...
Page 114 ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟ ﻣ ّﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ، ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟ ﻣ ّﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ...
Page 115 ‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻧﻙ. ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳ ُﺭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓ ُ ﻘﺩ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬Google ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣ ُﺳﺣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ، ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ...
Page 116 ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ، ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻼء‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬ ‫ ﺃﻳ ﺿ ً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‬LG Electronics ‫ﺳﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﻠﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬...
Page 117 ‫ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬ ‫ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬LG-M710ds ‫ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬LG Electronics ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬ ‫ /35 /4102. ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬EU http://www.lg.com/global/declaration ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬...
Page 118 ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‬ ‫1. ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫2. ﺳﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ...
Page 119 ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ. ﻟﻁﻔ ﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی‬LG ‫ﻣﺗﺷﮑﺭﻳﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ، ﺣﺗﻣ ﺎ ً ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﺁﻥ‬...
Page 120 ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ: ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ: ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﻧﮑﺗﻪ: ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 121 ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک...
Page 122 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ LG ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ LG Bridge ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ LG Health ‫ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ‬...
Page 123 ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺩﻫﺎی ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ، ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ ،‫ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬LG ‫ ﻣﺩﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬SAR ‫ﺍﮔﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﺡ‬ •...
Page 124 ‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ ﻫﻳﭼﮕﻭﻧﻪ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ‬LG .‫ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ، ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺑﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬...
Page 125 ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ‬ .‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ، ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ • .‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ، ﺑﺎ ﭘﺯﺷﮏ ﻣﺷﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ...
Page 126 ‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ، ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﮔﻭﺵ‬ .‫ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺗﯽ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ...
Page 127 • .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی، ﻫﻳﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺻﺩﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‬LG ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ • .‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻧﺩ‬...
Page 128 ‫ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ • .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ‬LG .‫ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬...
Page 129 ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬...
Page 130 .‫ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺗﺳﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻧﺗﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‬ LG ‫، ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ‬IP68 ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﺭﻏﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺗﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﺕ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ، ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﭘﺫﻳﺭ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ. ﻟﻁﻔ ﺎ ً ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬...
Page 131 .‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 5.1 ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 03 ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ، ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ، ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ، ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﻭ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ • .‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ...
Page 132 ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ‬ .‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ‬ .‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ...
Page 133 ‫ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ، ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ :‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ •...
Page 134 ‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ .‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‬ •...
Page 135 ‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ...
Page 136 ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 137 QuickMemo+ QuickMemo+ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻼﻗﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ...
Page 138 ‫ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬ •...
Page 139 ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻣﺟﺯﺍ، ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ،‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ .‫ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ، ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 140 ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬...
Page 141 ‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ • .‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‬LG Electronics ‫ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ‬ • ‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺕ ﺳﺎﻳﺯ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩﮐﻧﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬...
Page 142 ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی/ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ ‫ﮔﻭﺷﯽ‬ ‫ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬LED ‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ (-/+) ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬ ‫ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬microSD / ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ/ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺭﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻳﺵ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺵ‬ ‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻘﺏ‬ NFC ‫ﻗﺳﻣﺕ‬...
Page 143 ‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی/ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ • ،‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی: ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ، ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﻧﻭﺭ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ. ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ...
Page 144 ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ • .‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ. ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ‬ • ‫ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺯﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ...
Page 145 ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ‬ • ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺕ، ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ، ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ‬ .‫ ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬LG ‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ، ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻧﯽ‬ •...
Page 146 .‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻁﻼﻳﯽ‬ .‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬...
Page 147 ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﻪ ﮔﻡ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‬ • .‫ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬LG ،‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬...
Page 148 ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻅﺭﻓﻳﺕ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ 2 ﺗﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ. ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ‬microSD ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻥ، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ 23 ﮔﻳﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ، ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ‬ •...
Page 149 ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ، ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ‬ .‫ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬LG ،‫ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬...
Page 150 .‫ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬USB ‫ﺣﺗﻣ ﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬ • ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬LG ‫ﺣﺗﻣ ﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ‬ • ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬...
Page 151 • ‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ. ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ‬LG .‫ﻓﺎﺑﺭﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﭘﻳﺭﻭی ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ‬...
Page 152 ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺷﻧﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ‬ .‫ﻟﻣﺱ...
Page 153 ‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﺩﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ...
Page 154 ‫ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﻣﺛ ﻼ ً ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﻋﮑﺱ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ، ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ •...
Page 155 ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣ ﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﻪ...
Page 156 .‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ: ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ، ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • ‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ: ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬ • .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ،‫: ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﺎﺭی‬Google ‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی‬ •...
Page 157 ‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭی ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ‬ • ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺳﺗﻪ...
Page 158 ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ، ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ...
Page 159 ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬ ،‫ﺑﺭﺍی...
Page 160 ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ .‫ﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺩ‬ •...
Page 161 ‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻼﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ...
Page 162 ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‬ ‫، ﺍﻟﮕﻭ، ﮐﺩ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ‬Knock Code ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ، ﻗﻔﻝ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ...
Page 163 ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ، ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﺍﻳﻥ‬LG ‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ • ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ‬...
Page 164 Knock Code ‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬Knock Code ‫ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬Knock Code ‫ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ‬ .‫ﺷﻭﺩ، ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬Knock Code .‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 165 ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ • .‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‬ ‫ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬LG ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ • ،‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬...
Page 166 ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ‬ • ‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )+(، ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ+ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ، ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ...
Page 167 ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺩﻳﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬ .‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ LG ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ‬QWERTY ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬...
Page 168 ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ LG ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬...
Page 169 ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺭ‬ .‫ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬LG ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬...
Page 170 ‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ LG ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 171 ‫ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﻓﺿﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 172 ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺑﻠﺕ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬LG ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬...
Page 173 ‫ﺣﺗﻣ ﺎ ً ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی‬ • .‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬ • ‫ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 174 ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬...
Page 175: ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‬Play ‫ ﻭ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬SmartWorld ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ‬ • .‫ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ •...
Page 176: ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺳﭘﺱ...
Page 177 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ، ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﻣﺛ ﻼ ً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺍﺧﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 178 ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‬ ،‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ،‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ • .‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ-ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ/ﻗﻔﻝ، ﺭﻭی‬ •...
Page 179 ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ: ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ: ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 180 ‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ. ﺳﭘﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ، ﺭﻭی‬ :‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ، ﻳﮏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬ • .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ، ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺣﺫﻑ...
Page 181 ‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ • .‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 182 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﺩﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ، ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺩﻗﺕ...
Page 183 ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‬ • ‫ﺻﺩﺍ )-(، ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭ ﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬...
Page 184 .‫ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬GPS ‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی‬ .‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬SD ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬...
Page 185 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭘﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬...
Page 186 ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ، ﺭﻭی‬ AE/AF lock ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ، ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ، ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ...
Page 187 ‫ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ، ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ، ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ‬ • .‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﺍﻥ +/- ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ...
Page 188 ‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 189 ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍ ً ﺑﺎ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺻﻭﺭﺗﺗﺎﻥ، ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ • .‫ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻳﺩ، ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ •...
Page 190 ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ • .‫ﺭﻭی...
Page 191 ‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﻭﻳﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ • ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ، ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ...
Page 192 ‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ :‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ، ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬ • .‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ...
Page 193 ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬LG ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ‬ .‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‬...
Page 194 ‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ •...
Page 195 ‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﭘﺳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ • ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ...
Page 196: ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ
‫ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ، ﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬Google ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ • ‫ ﻧﻳﺯ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ‬Google ‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬ ‫...
Page 197 ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ، ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺑ ﻼ ً ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ •...
Page 198: ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ، ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﻣﻭﻗﺗ ﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺑﺭﺍی...
Page 199: ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻡ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ .‫ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬...
Page 200: Lg Health
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻳﮕﻳﺭی ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ‬ .‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ LG Health ‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ‬ LG Health ‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬LG LG Health ‫ﺭﻭی‬...
Page 201 ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﺷﮕﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی، ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬ .‫ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ً ‫ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻ ﻼ‬LG Health ‫ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ •...
Page 202 ‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬ .‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬ :‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ، ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 203: Lg Backup
• ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ، ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬LG ‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬...
Page 204: Remotecall Service
‫ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ، ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬Google ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬ .‫ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬Drive ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬Play ‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ‬LG ‫.* ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ‬ibf ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺳﻭﻧﺩ‬ •...
Page 205: Google ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی
Google ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬Google ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬Google ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬Google ‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ، ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬Google ‫ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬Google ‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ...
Page 206 Play ‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬ ‫ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی‬Google ‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ Play ‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬ ‫ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬Play ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ...
Page 207 ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬...
Page 208 ‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ • .‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﻁﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی...
Page 209 Wi-Fi .‫ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‬ .‫ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ .‫ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ •...
Page 210 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ‬Wi-Fi Direct ‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬...
Page 211 Bluetooth ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ‬Bluetooth ‫ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ‬Bluetooth ‫ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 212 ‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ...
Page 213 ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭی‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬NFC ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 214 ‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬ ‫ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ‬LG ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺑﻠﺕ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ • ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬...
Page 215 LG AirDrive ‫ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬LG ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬USB ‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ LG AirDrive ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬LG Bridge ‫ ﺗﮑﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ‬LG ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬...
Page 216 • ‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬www.lg.com ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ‬USB ‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ، ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭﺭ‬ • .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 217 Wi-Fi ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬ ‫ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 218 ‫ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ...
Page 219 ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ، ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ، ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ، ﻫﻣﭼﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬ .‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 220 ‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ. ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‬ • ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ، ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ...
Page 221 .‫ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬LED ‫ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ: ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬LED • ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺳﻳﻡ1 ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ / ﺳﻳﻡ2 ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ: ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬ • .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ...
Page 222 ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻭﻧﯽ: ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬ • .‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬LG ‫: ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬LG ‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬ • ‫ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی‬Google ‫: ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﻼی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬Google ‫ﺗﺎﻳپ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‬...
Page 223 ‫ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ :‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ: ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ •...
Page 224 .‫ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻡ:: ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻥ ﭘﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ: ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • .‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ: ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻭﭼﮏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • ‫ﺩﻳﺩ...
Page 225 .‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻛﻠﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﻛﻲ: ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ • ‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ: ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬ • .‫ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ: ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی‬ •...
Page 226 Google ‫ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬Google ‫ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬Google ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬Google ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ :‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ...
Page 227 ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﻳﺎ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 228 .‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬ :‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫: ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺭﺳﺗﻧﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ، ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ، ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ، ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬LG Backup • ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬...
Page 229 ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی: ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬ • .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ. ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ، ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ • .‫ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺍ ً ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬Google ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 230 ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬...
Page 231 LG Bridge LG Bridge ‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ، ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ، ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ‬LG Bridge ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬LG ‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ، ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬...
Page 232 ‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬LG ‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ. ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ‬ .‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬...
Page 233 ‫ ﺷﻣﺎ - ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ‬DRM ‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ‬ ‫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬LG ‫ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻭﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ‬LG .‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬...
Page 234 ‫ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ،‫ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ. ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ...
Page 235 ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺗﺎژ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬ .‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ LG ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬...
Page 236 ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ، ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ...
Page 237 ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩ، ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ. ﻣﺛ ﻼ ً ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ‬Google ‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺩﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﺵ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩ، ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ...
Page 238 ‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ، ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ < ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ < ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ‬LG .‫ 7102© ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺍﺳﺕ‬LG Electronics، Inc. ‫ﺣﻕ ﮐﭘﯽ‬ • .‫ ﻭ ﺷﺭﮐﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‬LG Group ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ‬LG ‫...
Page 239 ‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ‬ LG-M710ds ‫ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬LG Electronics ،‫ﺑﺩﻳﻧﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫ /35 /4102 ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ. ﻳﮏ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ‬EU ‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ ﺑﻳﺎﺑﻳﺩ‬http://www.lg.com/global/declaration ‫ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬...
Page 240 ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫1. ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮏ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻬﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﻟﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‬ ‫2. ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬ .‫ﺯﻳﺳﺕ...
Page 241 ENGLISH About this user guide Thank you for choosing this LG product. Please carefully read this user guide before using the device for the first time to ensure safe and proper use. • Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices.
Page 242 Instructional notices WARNING: Situations that could cause injury to the user and third parties. CAUTION: Situations that may cause minor injury or damage to the device. NOTE: Notices or additional information.
Page 243 Table of contents Guidelines for safe and efficient use Custom-designed Basic Functions Features Product components and accessories Notes on Water Resistant Parts overview Properties Turning the power on or off QuickButton Installing the SIM card Fingerprint recognition Inserting the memory card quick share Removing the memory card QuickMemo+...
Page 244 Messaging Display Camera General Gallery Music E-mail Calendar Calculator Clock Appendix Downloads File Manager LG Language Settings Voice Recorder LG Bridge FM Radio Phone software update LG Health Contacts Anti-Theft Guide Tasks More information LG Backup Regulatory information RemoteCall Service (Regulation ID number, E-labeling, etc.)
Page 245 ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to help determine the cause of the fault. These logs are encrypted and can only be accessed by an authorised LG Repair centre should you need to return your device for repair.
Page 246 Product care and maintenance • Use only in-box accessories which are authorised by LG. LG does not guarantee any damage or failure which is caused by third party accessories. • Some contents and illustrations may differ from your device without prior notice.
Page 247 • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the device. • Do not expose the device to liquid or moisture. • Use accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. • Do not use, touch or attempt to remove or fix broken, chipped or cracked glass. Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered under the warranty.
Page 248 Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of devices in the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held device while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require.
Page 249 Glass Parts Some parts of your device are made of glass. This glass could break if your device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider.
Page 250 You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’ s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
Page 251 Make sure to protect your personal information to prevent data leakage or misuse of sensitive information. • Always back up important data while using the device. LG is not responsible for any data loss. • Make sure to back up all data and reset the device when disposing of the device to prevent any misuse of sensitive information.
Page 252: Custom-Designed Features
Custom-designed Features...
Page 253: Notes On Water Resistant Properties
WARNING Despite a rating of IP68, your device is not impervious to conditions not tested in LG’ s controlled environment. Please note that any damages that occur due to such causes changes the colour of the LDI (Liquid Damage Indicator). If the colour of LDI located inside the product changes, the product is to be considered ineligible for any free-ofcharge repair services provided under the product’...
Page 254 Do not immerse your product in water deeper than approximately 1.5 meters. Do not immerse your product in water for longer than 30 minutes. • If your product becomes wet be sure to wipe the microphone, speaker, and stereo jack with a dry cloth before use. •...
Page 255: Quickbutton
QuickButton You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off. Outdoor Essentials Press once on the QuickButton. Select your desired tool. Globe Mode Double press the QuickButton. Turn Glove mode on or off. •...
Page 256: Fingerprint Recognition
Fingerprint recognition Fingerprint recognition overview You must register your fingerprint on your device first before using the fingerprint recognition function. You can use the fingerprint recognition function in the following cases: • To unlock the screen. • To view the locked content in the Gallery or QuickMemo+. •...
Page 257 • The device may generate static electricity if the surrounding air is dry. If the surrounding air is dry, avoid scanning fingerprints, or touch a metallic object such as coin or key before scanning fingerprints to remove static electricity. Registering fingerprints You can register and save your fingerprint on the device to use fingerprint identification.
Page 258 Follow the on-screen instructions. • Repeat scanning the fingerprint by moving your finger little by little until the fingerprint registers. When the fingerprint registration is done, tap OK. • Tap ADD MORE to register another fingerprint. If you register only one fingerprint and the corresponding finger is not in a good condition, the fingerprint recognition may not work well.
Page 259: Quick Share
quick share You can share a photo or video to the app you want immediately after taking it. Press , then take a photo or record a video. Tap the app icon that appears on the screen to share it using that app. You can also swipe the icon towards the opposite direction to see what other apps you can use to share your photos and videos.
Page 260: Quickmemo
QuickMemo+ QuickMemo+ overview You can make creative notes by using a variety of options on this advanced notepad feature, such as image management and screenshots, which are not supported by the conventional notepad. Creating a note Press QuickMemo+. to create a note. •...
Page 261 Writing notes on a screenshot While viewing the screen you want to capture, drag the status bar downwards and then tap • The screenshot appears as the notepad background theme. Memo tools appear at the top of the screen. Take notes as desired. •...
Page 262: Multi-Tasking Feature
Multi-tasking feature Multi window You can use two apps at the same time by separating the screen into the multiple windows. While using an app, press and hold from the Home touch buttons, then select an app from the recently used apps list. •...
Page 263: Qslide
QSlide You can start apps by using QSlide to use them while other apps are running. For example, use the calendar when a video is playing. When an app is running, tap QSlide. • This feature may not be supported by some apps. •...
Page 264: Basic Functions
Basic Functions...
Page 265: Product Components And Accessories
Always use genuine LG Electronics accessories. Using accessories made by other manufacturers may affect your device's call performance or cause malfunctions. This may not be covered by LG's repair service. • If any of these basic items are missing, contact the dealer from which you purchased your device.
Page 266: Parts Overview
Parts overview Proximity/Ambient light Earpiece sensor Notification LED Front camera lens QuickButton Volume keys (+/-) Power/Lock key Touch screen SIM/microSD card tray Fingerprint sensor/Home Microphone Stereo headset jack Flash Rear camera lens NFC area Speaker Charger/USB cable port Basic Functions...
Page 267 • Proximity/Ambient light sensor - Proximity sensor: During a call, the proximity sensor turns off the screen and disables touch functionality when the device is in close proximity to the human body. It turns the screen back on and enables touch functionality when the device is outside a specific range.
Page 268: Turning The Power On Or Off
• Screen-protective film or accessories may interfere with the proximity sensor. • If your device is wet or is being used in a humid place, the touch screen or buttons may not function properly. • Your device has a dual-layer screen system. The top layer is a protection screen and the bottom layer is a fixed screen.
Page 269: Installing The Sim Card
Be careful with the ejection pin since it has a sharp edge. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a LG Service Center to remove the memory card. •...
Page 270 Pull out the card tray. Put the SIM card on the card tray with the gold-colored contacts facing downwards. Basic Functions...
Page 271 Always make sure the card tray is dry. Precautions when using the SIM card • Do not lose your SIM card. LG is not responsible for damage and other issues caused by loss or transfer of a SIM card. •...
Page 272: Inserting The Memory Card
Inserting the memory card The device supports up to a 2 TB microSD card. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • It is recommended to use exFAT file system when using external memory more than 32GB.
Page 273: Removing The Memory Card
Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. This may cause data to be lost or corrupted, or may damage the memory card or the device. LG is not responsible for losses that result from the abuse or improper use of memory cards, including the loss of data.
Page 274: Charging The Battery
Make sure to use the USB cable provided with your device. • Make sure to use an LG-approved charger and charging cable. Charging the battery with a third-party charger may cause the battery to explode or may damage the device.
Page 275 • Make sure to use the USB cable provided; do not use third party USB cables or chargers with your device. The LG limited warranty does not cover the use of third party accessories. • Failure to follow the instructions in this guide and improper use may damage the device.
Page 276: Touch Screen
Touch screen You can familiarise yourself with how to control your device by using touch screen gestures. Tapping Lightly tap with your fingertip to select or run an app or option. Touching and holding Touch and hold for several seconds to display a menu with available options.
Page 277 Double-tapping Tap twice quickly to zoom in or out on a web page or map. Dragging Touch and hold an item, such as an app or widget, then move your finger to another location in a controlled motion. You can use this gesture to move an item.
Page 278 Swiping Tap the screen with your finger and move it quickly without pausing. You can use this gesture to scroll through a list, a web page, photos, screens, and more. Pinching and spreading Pinch two fingers to zoom out such as on a photo or map. To zoom in, spread your fingers apart.
Page 279 • A touch screen failure may occur if you use the device near a magnetic, metallic or conductive material. • If you use the device under bright lights, such as direct sunlight, the screen may not be visible, depending on your position. Use the device in a shady location or a location with an ambient light that is not too bright and bright enough to read books.
Page 280: Home Screen
Home screen Home screen overview The Home screen is the starting point for accessing various functions and apps on your device. Press on any screen to directly go to the Home screen. You can manage all apps and widgets on the Home screen. Swipe the screen left or right to view all installed apps at a glance.
Page 281 • Status bar: View status icons, the time and the battery level. • Weather widget: View the information of weather and time for a specific area. • Google search widget: Perform a Google search by inputting spoken or written keywords. •...
Page 282 Hotspot is on No SIM card • Some of these icons may appear differently or may not appear at all, depending on the device's status. Refer to the icons according to the actual environment in which you are using the device. •...
Page 283 Switching the screen orientation You can set the screen orientation to automatically switch according to the device's physical orientation. On the notification panel, tap Rotation from the quick access icon list. You can also press Settings Display and activate Auto- rotate screen.
Page 284 Viewing the background theme You can view only the background image by hiding the apps and widgets on the Home screen. Spread two fingers apart on the Home screen. • To return to the original screen, which displays apps and widgets, pinch your fingers on the Home screen or press Moving apps on the Home screen On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it to another...
Page 285 Using folders from the Home screen Creating folders On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it over another app. • A new folder is created and the apps are added to the folder. Editing folders On the Home screen, tap a folder and do one of the following actions. •...
Page 286: Screen Lock
Screen lock Screen lock overview Your device's screen turns off and locks itself if you press the Power/Lock key. This also happens after the device is left idle for a specified period of time. If you press the Power/Lock key when a screen lock is not set, the Home screen appears immediately.
Page 287 Secure start-up settings When you select Knock Code, Pattern, PIN or Password as a screen lock method, you can configure your device to be locked whenever turning on the device in order to secure your data. • You cannot use all functions, except for emergency calls until you unlock the device.
Page 288 You can turn the screen on or off by double-tapping the screen. • This option is available only on the Home screen provided by LG. It may not function properly on a custom launcher or on the Home screen installed by the user.
Page 289: Memory Card Encryption
Creating a Knock Code Press Settings Display Lock screen Select screen lock Knock Code. Tap the squares in a pattern of your choice to create a Knock Code and tap NEXT. Input the created Knock Code again for verification, then tap CONFIRM.
Page 290: Taking Screenshots
• Encrypted files are accessible only from the device where the files were encrypted. • The encrypted memory card cannot be used on another LG device. To use the encrypted memory card on another mobile device, format the card. •...
Page 291: Entering Text
Entering text Using the Smart keyboard You can use the Smart keyboard to enter and edit text. With the Smart keyboard, you can view text as you type without bothering to alternate between the screen and a conventional keyboard. This allows you to easily find and correct errors when typing. Moving the cursor With the Smart keyboard, you can move the cursor to the exact position you want.
Page 292 Changing the QWERTY keyboard layout You can add, delete or rearrange keys on the bottom row of the keyboard. Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout QWERTY keyboard layout. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout QWERTY keyboard layout.
Page 293 Customising the keyboard height You can customise the keyboard height to maximise hand comfort when typing. Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height.
Page 294 Selecting a landscape keyboard mode You can select a landscape keyboard mode from several choices. Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard type in landscape. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout Keyboard type in landscape.
Page 295 You can move the keyboard to one side of the screen so that you can use the keyboard with one hand. Press Settings General Language & keyboard LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout One-handed operation. You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and layout One-handed operation.
Page 296 Copy and Paste You can cut or copy text from an app, and then paste the text into the same app. Or, you can run other apps and paste the text into them. Touch and hold around the text you want to copy or cut. Drag to specify the area to copy or cut.
Page 297: Content Sharing
Content sharing Playing content from another device You can play photos, videos or songs saved on your device from a TV. Connect the TV and your device to the same Wi-Fi network. While viewing the items from the Gallery or Music app, tap Play on other device.
Page 298: Do Not Disturb
Sending or receiving files You can share files between your device and another LG device, or a tablet or computer. Sending files From the Gallery, File Manager or Music app, tap Share or , then select a device on the file sharing list.
Page 299: Useful Apps
Useful Apps...
Page 300: Installing And Uninstalling Apps
Installing and uninstalling apps Installing apps Access an app store to search and download apps. • You can use SmartWorld, Play Store or the app store provided by your service provider. • Some app stores may require you to create an account and sign in. •...
Page 301: Uninstalled Apps
Uninstalling by using the settings menu Press Settings General Apps, select an app, then tap Uninstall. Uninstalling apps from the app store To uninstall an app, access the app store from which you download the app and uninstall it. • Some apps cannot be uninstalled by users.
Page 302: Phone
Phone Voice call Make a phone call by using one of the available methods, such as manually entering a phone number and making a call from the contact list or the list of recent calls. Making a call from the keypad Press Dial.
Page 303 Answering a call To answer a call, drag to the outside of the circle on the incoming call screen. • When the stereo headset is connected, you can make calls by using the call/end button on the headset. • To end a call simply by pressing the Power/Lock key, press Settings Networks Call Common Answer and end calls, then turn on End call with the Power key.
Page 304 Functions accessible during a call During a call, you can access a variety of functions by tapping the on- screen buttons: • Contacts: View the contact list during a call. • End: End a call. • Dialpad: Display or hide the dial pad. •...
Page 305 Viewing call records To view recent call records, press Call logs. Then, you can use the following functions: • To view detailed call records, select a contact. To make a call to the selected contact, tap • To delete call records, tap Delete.
Page 306: Messaging
Messaging Sending a message You can create and send messages to your contacts using the Messaging app. • Sending messages abroad may incur additional charges. Consult with your service provider for more information. Press Specify a recipient and create a message. •...
Page 307: Camera
Camera Starting the camera You can take a photo or record a video to cherish all of your memorable moments. Press • Before taking a photo or recording a video, wipe the camera lens with a soft cloth. • Be careful not to stain the camera lens with your fingers or other foreign substance.
Page 308 Taking a photo Tap the subject to focus the camera on. to take a photo. • You can also press the Volume Down (-) or Volume Up (+) key to take a photo. • When the screen is turned off or locked, start the camera by pressing the Volume Down (-) key twice.
Page 309 Obtain photos in vivid colours, and get compensated effects even when they are taken against the light. These functions are provided by the high dynamic range (HDR) technology equipped in the camera of the device. Set the timer to automatically take photos after a Timer specified period of time.
Page 310 Various camera modes Panorama You can create a panoramic photo by moving the camera in one direction to photograph and stitch continuous shots of a wide view. In the AUTO mode, tap MODE and then slowly move the camera in one direction. •...
Page 311 Other useful features in the Camera app Burst shot You can take continuous shots of photos to create moving pictures. On the camera screen, touch and hold • Continuous shots are taken at a fast speed while is held down. •...
Page 312 Switching between cameras You can switch between the front and rear cameras to suit your environment. On the camera screen, tap or drag the screen in any direction to switch between the front and rear cameras. • Use the front camera to take selfies. See Selfie shot for details.
Page 313 Selfie shot You can use the front camera to view your face on the screen and take selfies. Gesture shot You can take selfies by using gestures. Show your palm to the front camera and then clench your fist. You can also clench your fist and then open it towards the front camera. •...
Page 314 Auto shot You can use the face detection feature to take selfies easily and conveniently. You can set the device so that, when you look at the screen, the front camera detects your face and takes a selfie automatically. • The white coloured guide frame appears when the front camera detects your face.
Page 315 Gesture view After taking a selfie with the front camera, you can preview the selfie immediately by placing the screen close to your face. • Gesture view to enable the Gesture view feature. • Only one preview is available each time a photo is taken. •...
Page 316: Gallery
Gallery Gallery overview You can view and manage photos and videos saved on your device. Press • Saved photos and videos are displayed by folder. Tap a folder and select a file. • View the selected file in full-screen mode. •...
Page 317 Editing photos While viewing a photo, tap Use a variety of effects and tools to edit the photo. Tap SAVE to save changes. • The changes are overwritten to the original file. • To save the edited photo as another file, tap Save copy.
Page 318 Deleting files You can delete files by using one of the following options: • Touch and hold a file from the file list, then tap Delete. • from the file list and delete the desired files. • Deleted files are automatically moved to Trash and they can be restored to the Gallery within 7 days.
Page 319: Music
Music You can play and manage songs or music albums. Press LG Music. Select a category. Select a music file. Switch to the playlist. Search for music files. Back to the previous screen. Access additional options. Add or delete favourites.
Page 320 E-mail Email overview You can register an email account to your device and then you can check and send emails from your device. • If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage depending on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more information.
Page 321: Calendar
Checking email and select a mail box. Select an email from the email list. • The email message appears. Sending email Enter the recipient’ s email address. Enter a subject and message. • To attach files, tap • To access optional menu items, tap . to send the email.
Page 322: Calculator
Syncing events Calendars to sync, and select a calendar to sync. • When your events are saved from the device to your Google account, they are automatically synced with the Google calendar, too. Then, you can sync other devices with the Google calendar in order to make those devices have the same events that your device has and to manage your events on those devices.
Page 323: Clock
Clock Alarm You can set an alarm to trigger it at a specified time. Press Clock Alarm. to add a new alarm. Configure the alarm settings and tap SAVE. • If you select a previously set alarm, you can edit the alarm. •...
Page 324: Downloads
Stopwatch You can use the stopwatch to record a lap time. Press Clock Stopwatch. Tap Start to initiate the stopwatch. • To record a lap time, tap Lap. Tap Pause to pause the stopwatch. • To resume the stopwatch, tap Resume. •...
Page 325: Voice Recorder
• This function may not be supported depending on the area. LG Health LG Health overview You can manage your health and maintain good exercise habits by keeping track of the exercises you do. Useful Apps...
Page 326 Getting started with LG Health You can configure LG Health when launching the app for the first time or after resetting it. Press LG LG Health. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete configuration. Using LG Health You can view main information on LG Health and manage the amount of physical exercise and health information.
Page 327: Contacts
LG Health may vary or may not be available, depending on the country and service provider. LG Health functions that are available and apps that can be added to LG Health may vary, depending on the country. This is due to differing laws and regulations.
Page 328 Adding contacts to the speed dial list On the contact list screen, tap Speed dial. Tap Add contact from a speed dial number. Select a contact. Searching for contacts You can search for contacts by using one of the following options: •...
Page 329: Tasks
• Resetting your device may delete backup files saved in internal storage. To minimise data loss, copy important backup files from the LG Backup folder in the internal storage to a computer or external storage. Useful Apps...
Page 330: Remotecall Service
Google memo app data and apps downloaded from Play store are stored on the Drive app automatically. • Backup files are saved with the file extension *.lbf under the LG Backup folder on the memory card or internal storage. •...
Page 331: Google Apps
Google apps You can use Google apps by setting a Google account. The Google account registration window appears automatically when you use a Google app for the first time. If you do not have a Google account, create one from your device.
Page 332 Play Movies & TV Use your Google account to rent or purchase movies. Purchase content and play it anywhere. Play Music Purchase music files from the Play Store. Play music files saved on your device. Sheets Create spreadsheets or edit spreadsheets created online or from another device.
Page 333: Settings
Settings...
Page 334: Networks
Settings You can customise the device settings in accordance with your preferences. Press Settings. • and enter a keyword in the search box to access a setting item. • to change the view mode. This user guide assumes that you are using the Tab view.
Page 335 Wi-Fi You can connect to nearby devices over a Wi-Fi network. Connecting to a Wi-Fi network On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi. to activate it. • Available Wi-Fi networks appear automatically. Select a network. • You may need to enter the network's Wi-Fi password. •...
Page 336 Wi-Fi Direct You can connect your device to other devices that support Wi-Fi Direct to share data directly with them. You do not need an access point. You can connect with more than two devices by using Wi-Fi Direct. On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi Advanced Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Direct.
Page 337 Bluetooth You can connect your device to nearby devices that support Bluetooth to exchange data with them. Connect your device to a Bluetooth headset and a keyboard. This makes it easier to control the device. Pairing with another device On the settings screen, tap Networks Bluetooth. to activate it.
Page 338 Mobile data You can turn on or off mobile data. You can also manage mobile data usage. Turning on mobile data On the settings screen, tap Networks Mobile data. to activate it. Customising mobile data settings On the settings screen, tap Networks Mobile data. Customise the following settings: •...
Page 339 Share & connect You can use the device as a transportation card or credit card. You can also share data with the other device. On the setting screen, tap Networks Share & connect NFC. to activate it. • Touch your device with other device that supports NFC to allow sharing data.
Page 340 File sharing You can send and receive files between your device and other LG devices or tablets. • Sending or receiving files for details. On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect File sharing. Customise the following settings: •...
Page 341 LG AirDrive You can use your LG account to manage files saved on the device from a computer. You do not need a USB connection. On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect LG AirDrive. Use a single LG account to sign in to LG Bridge on the computer and LG AirDrive on the device.
Page 342 • When connecting to a computer, download the USB driver from www.lg.com and install it on the computer. • You cannot send or receive files between your device and a computer while USB tethering is turned on. Turn off USB tethering to send or receive files.
Page 343 Wi-Fi hotspot You can set the device as a wireless router so that other devices can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Wi-Fi hotspot and then drag to activate it. Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot, and enter the Wi-Fi name (SSID) and password.
Page 344 Bluetooth tethering A Bluetooth-connected device can connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data. On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Bluetooth tethering and then drag to activate it. Turn on Bluetooth on both devices, and pair them. •...
Page 345 More Airplane mode You can turn off the call and mobile data functions. When this mode is on, functions that do not involve data, such as games and music playback, remain available. On the settings screen, tap Networks More Airplane mode. Tap TURN ON in the confirmation screen.
Page 346: Sound & Notification
Tap Add VPN. • This feature is available only when the screen lock is activated. If the screen lock is deactivated, a notification screen appears. Tap SETTINGS from the notification screen to activate the screen lock. See Setting a screen lock for details.
Page 347: Display
• Do not disturb: Set the time, range and app type to receive notification messages. Receive notification messages only on particular days of the week. • Lock screen: Display or hide a notification message on the lock screen. You can also hide private information. •...
Page 348 • Brightness: Use the slide bar to change the device's screen brightness. To automatically adjust screen brightness according to ambient light intensity, tap the Auto switch. • Auto: Set the device so that the screen brightness is automatically adjusted in accordance with the ambient light intensity. •...
Page 349: General
• Current keyboard: View the keyboard currently in use. Select a keyboard to use when entering text. • LG Keyboard: Customise the LG keyboard settings. • Google voice typing: Configure the options for text dictation by Google. Text-to-speech output: Configure the settings for text-to-speech •...
Page 350 Accounts & sync You can add or manage accounts, including a Google account. You can also sync particular apps or user information automatically. On the settings screen, tap General Accounts & sync. Customise the following settings: • Auto-sync data: Sync all the registered accounts automatically. •...
Page 351 • Vision Grayscale: Switch the screen to grayscale mode. • Vision End call with the Power key: End a call by pressing the Power/Lock key. • Vision Answer call with the Home key: Answer a call by pressing the home key. •...
Page 352 • Accessibility features shortcut: Quickly access a frequently used function by press three times. • Auto-rotate screen: Automatically change the screen orientation according to the physical position of the device. • Switch Access: Create key combinations to control your device. QuickButton You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off.
Page 353 Fingerprints & security On the settings screen, tap General Fingerprints & security. Customise the following settings: • Fingerprints: Use your fingerprint to unlock the screen or content. Fingerprint recognition overview for details. • Content lock: Set the method to lock files in the Gallery or QuickMemo+.
Page 354 Date & time You can customise date and time settings for your device. On the settings screen, tap General Date & time. Customise the settings. Storage You can view and manage internal storage on the device or storage space of the memory card. On the settings screen, tap General Storage.
Page 355 Reset the device, if necessary. On the settings screen, tap General Backup & reset. Customise the following settings: • LG Backup: Back up or restore the blocked sender list, messages, images, home screens and other data saved on the device. See Backup for details.
Page 356 • Network settings reset: Reset Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and other network settings. • Factory data reset: Reset all settings for the device and delete data. • Resetting your device deletes all data on it. Enter your device name, Google account and other initial information again. About phone You can view information about your device, such as the name, status, software details and legal information.
Page 357: Appendix
Appendix...
Page 358: Lg Language Settings
LG Bridge LG Bridge overview LG Bridge is an app that helps you manage the photos, music, videos and documents saved on your LG smartphone from your computer conveniently. You can back up contacts, photos and more to the computer or update the device software.
Page 359: Phone Software Update
This feature allows you to conveniently update the firmware on your phone to a newer version from the Internet without needing to visit a service centre. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device.
Page 360 This feature allows you to conveniently update your phone’ s software to a newer version via OTA, without connecting a USB cable. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available for your device.
Page 361: Faq
This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures There is no SIM card in Make sure the SIM card is SIM card error the phone or it is inserted...
Page 362 Plug the charger into a different No voltage outlet. Charger defective Replace the charger. Wrong charger Use only original LG accessories. Number not The Fixed dialling number Check the Settings menu and allowed. function is on. turn the function off.
Page 363 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Restarting the device If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close apps or turn off the device and turn it on again. Performing a soft reset A soft reset may be used to reset the device if the screen freezes, or the buttons, touch screen, or device are no longer...
Page 364: Anti-Theft Guide
Anti-Theft Guide Set up your device to prevent other people from using it if it's been reset to factory settings without your permission. For example, if your device is lost, stolen, or wiped, only someone with your Google account or screen lock information can use the device.
Page 365: More Information
In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com .
Page 366 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, LG Electronics declares that this LG-M710ds product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.lg.com/global/declaration Appendix...
Page 367 Disposal of your old appliance 1. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local authorities. 2. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.

This manual is also suitable for:

Lgm710ds.airnbk

LG -M710ds User Manual

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for LG LG-M710ds

Summary of Contents for LG LG-M710ds

This manual is also suitable for: